Dodge 2010 Challenger Owner`s manual

2010
OWNE R ’ S MANUAL
Challenger
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain this Owner’s Manual:
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
INTRODUCTION
5
1
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
VIN Location
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Remote Open Window Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Open The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 25
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
䡵 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 42
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 43
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 51
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 69
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
11
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically
returns to the RUN position.
Keyless Go Feature
This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Go
feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Go, the
Operating” for further information.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
the ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
13
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACCESSORY (ACCESSORY)
— RUN
— START
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the theft alarm armed, will results in the alarm sounding.
Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead)
into the WIN to disarm theft alarm.
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
then pull the key out with your other hand.
With the Keyless Go system, the EVIC will display the
ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Emergency Key Removal
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerNOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in
the ignition or a vehicle equipped with Keyless Go in
the ACC or RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
15
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Go, opening the
driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed
in ACC or RUN (engine stopped) will cause the reminder
chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. This
condition will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition possible by an authorized dealer.
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
NOTE: The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems.
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid
problems and loss of security protection.
Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
After placing the ignition switch in the RUN position, the
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
17
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it System serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
the authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go, always
remember to place the ignition in OFF.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). • This device may not cause harmful interference.
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is • This device must accept any interference that may be
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
received, including interference that may cause undesDuplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authoired operation.
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is
closed, or if both doors and the trunk are closed, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that time, the Vehicle Security Light will
flash. If it does not illuminate, the Vehicle Security Alarm
is not arming. In addition, if you open a door during the
arming period, the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the
arming process. If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security
Rearming Of The System
Alarm after closing the door, you must repeat one of the
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
previously-described arming sequences.
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will Press the Keyless Go Start/Stop button until the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) indicates that
rearm itself.
the vehicle ignition is ⬙OFF⬙ (refer to “Starting ProceTo Arm The System
dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further information). Then either press the power door LOCK switch
Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Go
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press while the driver or passenger door is open, or press the
a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK button.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
19
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously-described arming sequences has ocVehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Go
curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch.
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
Security Alarm.
remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go
the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter,
alarm will sound.
press the Keyless Go Start/Stop button (requires at least
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior one valid Key Fob in the vehicle), or insert a valid Key
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. Fob into the ignition switch (if the Start/Stop button is
removed) and rotate it to the RUN position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
To Disarm The System
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for
tampering.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE
transmitter or open any door.
transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter
switch is placed in RUN from the OFF position.
buttons for all RKE transmitters.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
Key Fob with RKE Transmitter
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds, to unlock both doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- • When not using the EVIC, perform the following
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
steps:
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
Fob removed.
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
its previous setting.
still holding the UNLOCK button.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key
Fob removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
23
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customerwill cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by presster to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob
removed.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be its previous setting.
turned on or turned off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph
Remote Open Window Feature
This feature allows you to remotely lower both door (24 km/h) or greater.
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
NOTE:
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
switch to the ACC or RUN position while the Panic
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
lower completely.
horn will remain on.
To Open The Trunk
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
times within five seconds to open the trunk.
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
Using The Panic Alarm
by the system.
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
25
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
performed at an authorized dealer.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may aptighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitter
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
operation.
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
General Information
remove the screw. With the RKE ransmitter buttons
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
following conditions:
elastomer seal during removal.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on • This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
operation.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an autoproved by the party responsible for compliance could matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
How To Use Remote Start
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of •
the battery is a minimum of three years.
•
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
•
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
•
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry •
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- •
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of •
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
•
Shift lever in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
RKE PANIC button not pressed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
27
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
To Enter Remote Start Mode
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position)
Press and release the REMOTE START button
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seccycle.
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to
• Press and release the REMOTE START button one time
drive the vehicle.
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
cycle.
message “Insert Key/Turn To On” will display in the
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
EVIC until you insert the Key Fob. Once inserted, the
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
message “Turn To On” will display in the EVIC until
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
you turn the Key Fob to ON.
Start request.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
message “Push Button/Insert Key” will display in the
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
EVIC until you push the START button.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON
position.
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Plunger
29
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the
Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in the ignition,
and the ignition is in the OFF or ACC position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically if all of the following
conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled
2. The transmission is in gear
3. All doors are closed
Power Door Lock Switch
4. The throttle is pressed
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key 5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h)
Fob is in the ignition, and either door is open, the power
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power 6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
transmitter
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InforAutomatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customeryour authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Inprogramming.
strument Panel” for further information.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following
steps:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- 1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
abled
2. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
3. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h)
OFF and RUN and then back to OFF four times ending
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK
up in the LOCK position. However, do not start the
engine.
4. The driver door is opened
5. The doors were not previously unlocked
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Within 30 seconds, press the power door UNLOCK
switch to unlock the doors.
5. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
NOTE: If you do not hear the chime, it means that the
system did not enter the programming mode and you
will need to repeat the procedure.
6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Power Window Switches
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
WINDOWS
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
door. The window controls will operate only when the
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of ignition switch is in the RUN or ACC position.
the door windows.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The door window will lower slightly if it is closed
completely when opening the door. The window will
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance
and prevents window and seal damage.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger
door power window switch have an AUTO-down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
33
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
Trunk Release button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds.
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
one window open, then open the other window to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the Trunk Release button. The button is located
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Trunk Release
Button
With the ignition switch in the ON position, the Trunk
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmis- indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
sion, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h) will reappear once the trunk is closed.
before the button will operate.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
35
Trunk Emergency Release
WARNING!
2
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Emergency Release
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
vehicle are the restraint systems:
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
all passengers
(LATCH).
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenNOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
ger
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision.
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
Please pay close attention to the information in this
— if equipped
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
37
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
2. The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
belt is routed through the seat web guide. When the belt plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
is routed outside of the seat web guide, the latch plate
will contact the quarter trim panel. Grasp the latch plate
and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing
as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
Latch Plate To Buckle
Latch Plate
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snug.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs are not as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
41
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and have it
fixed.
2
Removing Slack From Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
allow the belt to retract fully.
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically preUse the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
shoulder belt.
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the able on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt.
anchor point.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position.
Children 12 years old and younger should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
43
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
the entire belt is extracted.
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Renow in the Automatic Locking Mode.
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision deploys the
How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
airbags and/or pretensioners, a deployed airbag and/or
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt from the
pretensioner must be replaced immediately.
buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert威 will alert
the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert威 will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for
96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
1. With both doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except RUN or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position, but do
not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light
to turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within
60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the RUN
position.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
BeltAlert威 Programming
The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de- re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the seat belt.
activating the BeltAlert威.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
45
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single Seat Belt Extender
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
completed the programming.
extender. This extender should be used only if the
The BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this proexisting belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
cedure.
remove the extender and store it.
NOTE: When the BeltAlert威 is deactivated, the Seat Belt
WARNING!
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is low and snug and in the recommended seating posithe best way to keep the baby safe.
tion. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
the force if there is a collision.
belt restraint systems. The driver’s front airbag is
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passen- NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
ger’s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, regulations for Advanced Airbags.
above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
are embossed on the airbag covers.
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.
Advanced Front Airbags
1 — Airbags
2 — Knee Bolsters
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Front Airbag
• Front Passenger Airbag
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners — if equipped
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
— if equipped
• Supplemental Side Seat Airbags — if equipped
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
47
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the impact sensors
at the front of the car.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash
severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.
(Continued)
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the
SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protection.
49
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block
the location of the SABIC. The area where the side
curtain airbag is located should remain free from
any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for
the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag.
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
their arm.
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
Children 12 years old and younger should always ride
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
buckled up in a rear seat.
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
front airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severe
injury or death to infants in that position.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
Airbags room to inflate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not lean against the door. If your vehicle has side
airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags will
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
51
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Airbags need
room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
(Continued) side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air- The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
bags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners — airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
if equipped, as required, depending on severity and type of collision.
of impact.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi- time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and deployed.
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not exSeat belts are necessary for your protection in all collipected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
collisions.
away from an inflating airbag.
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
or RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, in the
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
on and will not inflate.
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
53
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately six to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
comes on again after initial startup.
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units.
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation
malfunction.
rates are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about
the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
your control of the vehicle.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on severity and airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The bags
fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about
half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front and Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining appropriate response to impact events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag
deployment and provide verification.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
55
• Unlock the doors automatically.
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
until the ignition key is turned off.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
57
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify an
advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
switch is first turned RUN.
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either highspeed deceleration data or change in velocity during
• The light remains on after the approximate six to
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
eight-second interval.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
• The light comes on and remains on while driving.
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
59
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
In conjunction with other data gathered during a comprovided to the custodial entity upon request. General
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. governinjuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performent and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, veChrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be rehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
third party except when:
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
ance organizations.
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the compreserved.
pany or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the 2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before Group LLC product.
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
airbag system
• Vehicle speed
WARNING!
• Engine RPM
• Brake switch status
• Pedal position
• And other parameters
configuration
depending
on
vehicle
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
61
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)”.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
than one year. These child seats are also held in the • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
as possible.
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)”.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
their back.
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltNOTE:
For additional information, refer to
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canalap/shoulder belt.
dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s webChildren too Large for Booster Seats
site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
63
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
cause serious personal injury.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
strap kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
restraint in any vehicle.
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCHcompatible child seats so that two seats share a common
lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent
rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail- LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehiable. However, because the lower anchorages are to be cle’s seat belts.
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
65
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward- NOTE:
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant • Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
the strap.
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
seatcover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorbehind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
most direct path between the anchor and the child
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
removing slack in the straps according to the child
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
67
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
Locking Mode”.
To install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seat
belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the
belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate
into the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instrucseat where you are placing the child restraint.
tions.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
69
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energyconserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recomPets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
mended viscosity and quality grades refer to “Mainteor pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An
unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured,
or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
71
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate Vehicle
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
Seat Belts
use the recirculation mode.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- or retractor condition, replace the belt.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
Airbag Warning Light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for located and corrected immediately.
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 77
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 78
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of
Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
䡵 Uconnect™ phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Uconnect™ phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3
74
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 109 䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 124
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . 124
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Easy Entry Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 125
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
75
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . 128
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . .
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 137
. . . . . 139
. . . . 141
. . . . . 142
. . . . . 142
3
76
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Opening Sunroof — Partially . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Closing Sunroof — Partially . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Sliding Center Console Armrest . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
77
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
3
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
78
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The
mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of
the vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards
the front of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Folding Mirrors
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel, next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
79
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Vanity Mirrors
A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Power Mirror Control
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
3
80
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the
visor and pull rearward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” and Extender Features of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
Slide-On-Rod Extender
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular
phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
81
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
3
82
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be Voice Command Button
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
Actual button location may vary with the raEnglish, Spanish, or French languages.
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
Depending on the vehicle options, either the
radio or the mirror will contain the two control
(Uconnect™ Phone button) and
buttons
(Voice Command button) that will enable you to access the system.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any Uconnect™
Phone features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
83
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
the Uconnect™ Phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
combined form of the voice command is given. You
certain radios.
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
Operation
example, you can use the combined form voice comVoice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
combined form command into two voice commands:
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a
specific command and then guided through the available
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
options.
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
Voice Command Tree
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
prompt.
Help Command
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play all the options
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
at any prompt if you ask for help.
3
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
button and follow the audible prompts for pairing instructions:
the
directions. All Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a • Press the
button to begin.
button on the radio control head.
press of the
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Cancel Command
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal IdentiPair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your cellular
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instrucphone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
tions for pairing.
given a unique phone name.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ Phone. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
85
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ⬙Dial.⬙
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
• Press the
button to begin.
3
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
Uconnect™ Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which • When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
may appear in the display of certain radios.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
main menu.
• Press the
button to begin.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomsupported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatimended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
87
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downTransfer From Cellular Phone
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availUconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
for use.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected celluAccess Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
lar phone is accessible.
website for supported phones.
• Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
• To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect™)
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonePhonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
book.
Name” section.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
3
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™
Phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
button and say “Phonebook Download.” The system
prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
NOTE:
• The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
deleted or edited.
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
• Press the
button to begin.
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
89
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
entry that you wish to edit.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, when the vehicle is not in motion.
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• Press the
button to begin.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
phonebook entry that you are editing.
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
to the main menu.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
number to a name entry that already exists in the
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
button while the
from the list, press the
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
⬙Delete.⬙
feature.
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will • Note that only the phonebook in the current language
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
is deleted.
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
wish to delete.
deleted or edited.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
List All Names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook
language is deleted.
button to begin.
• Press the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
book entries, if available.
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
button during the playing of the desired name, and
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
say ⬙Call.⬙
• Press the
button to begin.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
deleted.
operations at this point.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
91
• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the call, press and hold the
button until you hear a
number designation you wish to call.
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
cellular phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the Progress
button to accept the call. To reject the To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
call. Press the
button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed
press the
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling
Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under ⬙Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
Toggling Between Calls
beep,
indicating
that
the
two calls have been joined into
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
one
conference
call.
button until you hear a single beep,
press the
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls Call Termination
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
time.
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
93
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
Redial
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
button to begin.
• Press the
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
⬙Redial.⬙
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the cellular phone.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
was dialed from your cellular phone.
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
OFF.
Uconnect™ Phone.
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Language Selection
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail- using:
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• Press the
button to begin.
3
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
the name of the language you wish to switch to operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete •
the language selection.
•
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
Press the
button to begin.
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct the
paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This
feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone- NOTE:
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language- • The emergency number dialed is based on the country
specific and usable across all languages.
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
Emergency Assistance
not be applicable with the available cellular service
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
and area.
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency • If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and
some systems. To do this, press the
number for your area.
say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
95
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your NOTE:
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that • The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528for the cellular phone directly.
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14WARNING!
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
⬙Towing Assistance⬙ coverage details on the DVD in
Uconnect™ Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
in emergency situations, when the cellular phone has
Towing Assistance references.
network coverage and stays paired to the Uconnect™
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
Phone.
some systems. To do this, press the
button and
Towing Assistance
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
If you need towing assistance:
Paging
• Press the
button to begin.
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required to enter
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
press the
button and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying
with Automated Systems.⬙
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is
Working with Automated Systems
also
to be used for navigating through an automated
This method is used in instances where one generally has
customer
service center menu structure, and to leave a
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
number
on
a pager.
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send.” The
call and then press the
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence tones over the phone.
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
97
NOTE:
• Press the
button to begin.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
network configurations. This is normal.
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The Uconnect™ Phone will
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
will be given the choice to change it.
use of this feature.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice your cellular phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is notification to inform you of your phone and network
asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,⬙ you status when you are attempting to make a phone call
button and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for roaming,
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
the voice prompt.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™ via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular • Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
• Press the
button.
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular phone to the
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
button
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
and
say
⬙Transfer
Call.⬙
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
99
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
Uconnect™ Phone and Cellular Phone
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
button and
phone being announced, press the
with one electronic device at a time.
say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
paired phone.
connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular
phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions Select Another Cellular Phone
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• Press the
button to begin.
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• You can also press the
button at any time while
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Cellular Phones
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
training mode, follow one of the two following proce• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the dures:
prompts.
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
• You can also press the
button at any time while radio mode):
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you • Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
wish to delete.
the session begins, or,
• Press the
button to begin.
• Press the
button and say the ⬙Setup, Voice
Training⬙ command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
101
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the Voice Training
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
you.
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
blower fan switched off.
during a Voice Command period.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
• Performance is maximized under:
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
To restore the Voice Command system to factory default
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
• low road noise,
Voice Command
• smooth road surface,
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
• fully closed windows,
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
• dry weather condition.
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When navigating through an automated system such • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
compromised with the convertible top down.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
Phone Far End Audio Performance
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
• Audio quality is maximized under:
not in motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero).
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
number combinations may not be supported.
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
103
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
105
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
107
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
109
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to command.
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
seconds, the system will present you with a list of listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
button, listen a normal speaking volume.
options, press the Voice Command
for the beep, and say your command.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton while the dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system set to low.
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
change commands. This will become helpful once you commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
start to learn the options.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, Command
button and say “Help” or “Main
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
111
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
Changing the Volume
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
button.
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
this mode, you may say the following commands:
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command • “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for • “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Main Menu
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
menu.
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
mands:
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
113
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
System Setup
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
• “Language German”
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Language Dutch”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Language Italian”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Language English”
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Language French”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
• “Language Spanish”
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Tutorial”
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Voice Training”
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice SEATS
button first and wait for the beep Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
Command
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
operation of the vehicle.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogWARNING!
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
• DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
and will improve recognition.
using a seat belt properly.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” Power Seats
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan of the front seat cushions. The power seat switch can be
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new moved forward and backward as well as up and down to
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. control the position of the seat. The power seatback
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
switch is used to adjust the angle of the seatback. Push
forward or rearward on the switch to change the position
of the seatback.
115
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Control
2 — Power Seatback Control
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seatback Recline
To recline:
1. Lean forward in the seat and lift the handle, then lean
back to the desired position and release the handle.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Lumbar Support
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Recline Lever
2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
117
your ear. To raise it, pull upward on the head restraint. To
lower it, press the button on the post guide and push
downward on the head restraint.
3
Lumbar Support
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. The head restraints should be adjusted
so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of
Adjustable Head Restraint
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should always be checked prior to operating the
vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in
motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the
vehicle is in PARK.
Heated Seats
The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated. The
Heated Seat Switch
heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and
seatback. The controls for each heater are located near the After placing the ignition in the ON position, you can
choose from High, Low or Off heat settings. Amber
bottom center of the instrument panel.
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for High, one for
Low and none for Off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
If high level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of indicators
illuminated changes from two to one, indicating the
change. Operation on the low setting also turns off
automatically after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
119
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
Easy Entry Seats
Pulling upward on the lever, located on the seatback,
allows the seatback to dump forward and the seat to slide
forward. You can also temporarily remove the seat belt
from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat belt to
retract out of the way. This allows for easier access to the
rear seat.
Easy Entry Seats
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
121
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the seatback above the seat strap.
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
WARNING!
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Rear Folding Seat
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
Hood Safety Catch
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
123
LIGHTS
Headlights and Parking Lights
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Headlight Switch
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light
and instrument panel light operation.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Underwill stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ignition in the OFF position. To turn the automatic
Headlight Time Delay
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
position.
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- unlit area.
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
125
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition is placed in the
RUN position, the headlights are off and the parking
brake is released. The headlight switch must be used for
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
normal nighttime driving.
the ignition in the RUN position again, the system will
Lights-On Reminder
cancel the delay.
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the
turn off in the normal manner.
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
Fog Lights — If Equipped
of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
The front fog light switch is built into the headfeature.
light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding lights, either press the headlight switch again or turn off
the headlight switch.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection, and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
127
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Elec- lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a con- will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more released.
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Overhead Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the RUN position or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Control
129
will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights
and, if equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets,
door handles and cupholders.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
The dimmer control is part of the position. The interior lights will remain off when the
headlight switch and is located on the doors are open.
left side of the instrument panel. With
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
the parking lights or headlights on,
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
rotating the dimmer control upward
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
the RUN position. The multifunction lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired delay interval. There are
six delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe
interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a
maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
Push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering
column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle
to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The
wipers will continue to operate until you release the
multifunction lever.
131
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) to the second detent and
Headlights On With Wipers (Available with
hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
Automatic Headlights Only)
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
three wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO)
and then resume the intermittent interval previously position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
selected.
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt Steering Column
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
133
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering The Electronic Speed Control lever, located on the rightcolumn in position, push the control handle inward until side of the steering wheel, operates the system.
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
Electronic Speed Control Lever
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elecaccelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
(40 km/h).
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
lever downward to SET DECEL and release. Remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button located on the end NOTE:
of the Electronic Speed Control lever. The indicator light • Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd, 4th,
or 5th gear when in the Autostick威 mode (if
in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the
equipped).
speed control system is on. To turn the system off, push
and release the ON/OFF button again. The system and
• Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different
the indicator light will turn off.
size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact
spare tire.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Deactivate
The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the memory if you:
• Softly tap the brake pedal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
135
• Press the brake pedal, or press the clutch pedal to the RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed
floor (manual transmission).
will be established.
• Pull the speed control lever toward you (CANCEL).
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME
Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning the
ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory.
increase. Each time the lever is tapped speed increases, so
tapping the lever three times will increase speed by
To Resume Speed
If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set,
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), you can resume the
push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever
previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to
in SET DECEL. If the lever is continually held in the SET
RESUME ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot
DECEL position, the set speed will continue to decrease
from the accelerator pedal.
until the lever is released. Release the lever when the
desired speed is reached, and a new set speed will be
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- established.
crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DEACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
CEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
decrease. Each time the lever is tapped, speed decreases.
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
The automatic transmission will downshift while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed (HomeLink威) button and a power sunroof switch may
Control.
also be included, if equipped.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
137
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handCourtesy/Reading Lights
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
At the forward end of the overhead console are two door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
courtesy/reading lights.
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time battery.
to turn off the light.
Overhead Console
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two or three dots/lines designating the different HomeLink威 channels.
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets, or
other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–
3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming HomeLink姞
139
2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink威.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING 3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC mes- HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #
sage states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to Then release both the HomeLink威 and handheld transHomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate mitter buttons.
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
while training.
handheld transmitter.
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section. NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAINING” repeat Step 3.
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
141
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
button. The name and color of the button may vary by Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
manufacturer.
transmission – which may not be long enough for
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
activates, programming is complete.
door or gate motor.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons, successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to
erase the channels.
“CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #
at this time.
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with ProgramHomeLink威” earlier in this section.
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed Security
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, in your vehicle.
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
used at any time.
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. IndiReprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
vidual channels cannot be erased.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
follow these steps:
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
Troubleshooting Tips
General Information
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
are some of the most common solutions:
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
• Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for rolling code.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
operation
to plug it back in?
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the
Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped
with Keyless Go™). Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
145
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Partially
Press and hold the switch in the forward position.
Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position
desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold
the switch in the forward position, the sunroof will close
Opening Sunroof — Partially
Press and hold the switch in the rearward position. fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once
Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position the sunroof stops moving.
desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold Closing Sunroof — Express
the switch in the rearward position, the sunroof will open Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
the sunroof stops moving.
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
3
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. If this occurs remove
the obstruction and press the switch forward and release
to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurpressed.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Venting Sunroof — Express
the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to
Press and release the Vent button in the center of the minimize the buffeting or open any window.
switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called “Express Vent”, which operates regardless
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
147
Sunroof Maintenance
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
the glass panel.
on this vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The
time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit. If desired, the front power outlet can be
converted by your authorized dealer to provide power
when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
element must be used.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
Front Power Outlet
The center console power outlet is powered directly from
the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged
into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
Front Cupholders
Illuminated Front Cupholders — If Equipped
The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs. They
are turned on with the headlights or parking lights. Refer
to “Lights” in “Understanding the Features of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupants’ elbows.
Rear Cupholders
151
CONSOLE FEATURES
Sliding Center Console Armrest
The center console armrest slides forward with three
detents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use
and shifting ease.
Sliding Console Armrest
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Storage
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest, and also contains a 12 Volt
power outlet, a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold
various size coins). The center console may also be
equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
iPhone威 devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface
(UCI) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Center Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
153
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Keyless Go Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 181
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Base
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 161
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 174
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 177
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ System Warnings (Customer Information
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4
156
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/
Nav — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ phone
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio . . . . . 189
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack). . . . . . . 193
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 193
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 201
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 202
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 212
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 212
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Connecting The iPod威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES Radios
Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
157
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
䡵 Kicker威 High Performance Sound System With
Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 227
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4
158
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlets
— Instrument Cluster
— Glove Compartment
— Radio
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Heated Seat Switch
ESP OFF Switch
Hazard Warning Switch
Climate Control
9 — Ignition Switch
10 — Trunk Release Button
11 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
159
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – BASE
4
160
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – PREMIUM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
161
trip odometer is displayed to reset it to 0 miles (km). A
second press of the button will display the outside
temperature in the odometer.
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is placed in the RUN position.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Trip Odometer Button
4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light
Premium Cluster
This light will turn on when the electronic
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
speed control is on.
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
5. Tachometer
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
reset it.
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
Base Cluster
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
The word ⬙Trip⬙ will appear when this button is pressed. area.
Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the
4
162
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the RUN position and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the
charging system is experiencing a problem. See your
local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key.
The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the
engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not come on during starting.
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
8. Temperature Gauge
when the ignition switch is placed in the RUN
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaposition. This light will also turn on while the
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
engine is running if there is a problem with the
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the
engine OFF immediately and call for service.
163
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
9. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
4
164
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for six to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
placed in the RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, turns on while driving,
or stays on, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition.
When this light turns on, the engine temperature
is critically hot. If the light turns on while driving, safely
pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be
turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as possible. (Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information).
12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and
do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light
The malfunction light for the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Light” comes on when the ignition
switch is placed in the RUN position. They should go out
with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
If a warning light remains on the system may not be
working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or
BAS. Under certain driving conditions, where ESP or
BAS would be beneficial, you - if you have not
adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to
account for the lack of the feature, may be in accident.
14. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
165
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
15. High Beam Indicator
This indicator will turn on when the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
high beam.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
placed in RUN. A chime will sound if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat
Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb
check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4
166
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
lights are on.
the odometer must be reset at zero.
19. Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Vehicle Odometer Messages
(EVIC) Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
messages will display in the odometer:
been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip
mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator
information.
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans- Lo tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur- noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
17. Shift Lever Indicator — Automatic Transmission
Only
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Cluster, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) for further information.
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. The
ECO display will toggle on and off depending on driving
habits and vehicle usage.
167
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Lo tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
gASCAP
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odomIf the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
Vehicle”.
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
4
168
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CHAngE OIL (Base Cluster)
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition switch in the RUN position.
To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
the scheduled maintenance) perform the following pro- If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
cedure:
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position (do not master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
start the engine).
remain on until the condition has been corrected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
169
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
sary.
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
4
170
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
applied with the ignition switch in the RUN position.
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
until the vehicle is disarmed.
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
should be checked monthly, when cold and tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle plac- not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires low tire pressure telltale.
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
171
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
172
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
24. Low Fuel Light
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the RUN position and may stay on for
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
as long as four seconds.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
OBD system monitors engine and automatic
functioning and service is required. However, the con- transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
ventional brake system will continue to operate normally the ignition is in the RUN position before engine start. If
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
the MIL does not come on when turning the key from
OFF to RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
ignition switch is tplaced in the RUN position, have the engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
173
26. Door Ajar Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate that one or more
door may be ajar.
27. Decklid Ajar Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate that the
decklid may be ajar.
4
28. Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the windshield
washer fluid is low.
174
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display which is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Uconnect™ Phone (If Equipped)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Uconnect™ gps Screens (If Equipped)
• Audio Mode Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
175
• Surround Sound modes (if equipped with Driver- SCROLL Button
Selectable Surround [DSS])
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Performance Pages, Uconnect™ gps
The system allows the driver to select information by
(If Equipped), System Status Messages, and
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
wheel.
Features). The SCROLL button also functions as a remote
sound system control. Refer to “Remote Sound System
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button and the Controls”.
mode displayed will change between Trip
AUDIO MODE Button
Functions, Performance Pages, Uconnect™ gps
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
(If Equipped), System Warnings, System StaCompass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with
tus, and Personal Settings.
compass reading and outside temperature, this
screen will display radio and media mode
FUNCTION SELECT Button
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept information depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”.
also functions as a remote sound system control. Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”.
4
176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
Displays
motion)
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
the following messages.
• Oil Change Required
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with • Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
either turn signal on)
• Channel # Transmit
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Channel # Training
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Channel # Trained
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
• Clearing Channels
chime)
• Channels Cleared
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Did Not Train
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
• Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime)
• Left/Right Door Ajar
• Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
177
• Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime)
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
• Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime)
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
• Check TPM System (with a single chime)
• ESP Off – Electronic Stability Program is deactivated
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
• Check Gascap
• Key Fob Battery Low
• Service Keyless System
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
• Push Button or Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica“Remote Starting System” in “Things To Know Before
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
Starting Your Vehicle”)
refer to the following procedure.
• 1–4 SKIPSHIFT
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
• Wrong Key
4
178
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode — If
Equipped
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
Trip Functions
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
reset.
• Distance To Empty
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
• Display Units of Measure in
The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
will appear whenever MDS (if equipped) allows the
engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
179
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
4
Fuel Saver Mode — On
Fuel Saver Mode — Off
180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
• Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
• Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
• Elapsed Time
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) or START position.
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
• Display Units of Measure in
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCcontinue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
appears.
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
181
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed function. (>Reset ALL will display during this three-second
window.)
Keyless Go Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Go icon
Keyless Go Display
momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing the
The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the
new ignition switch position.
new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition
switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible
by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display
appears.
4
182
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to “Keyless Go” in “Starting And Operating” for While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change surround modes. The
more information.
Video Surround Mode will only be available for video
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
supported by the radio).
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display
Compass Display
always re-appears.
The compass readings indicate the direction
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
Equipped
HOME button to display one of eight compass
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround
readings and the outside temperature.
HOME
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides inforButton
mation on the current surround mode.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
• Stereo
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
• Video Surround
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
• Audio Surround
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
183
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message Compass Variance
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows: North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass headtwo seconds.
ing.
4
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately
two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the EVIC.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the HOME button to exit.
System Warnings (Customer Information
Features)
Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM
WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the
SCROLL button to display anyone of the following
choices.
Compass Variance Map
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
185
FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.
• Tire Pressure
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect™ lanTHE SPARE TIRE).
guage selection.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall When ON is selected, both doors will lock automatically
features when the transmission is in PARK.
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCPress and release the MENU button until Personal SetTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
tings displays in the EVIC.
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
When ON is selected, both doors will unlock when the
choices.
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
Language
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
When in this display you may select one of three lan- make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
functions and the Uconnect™ gps (if equipped). Press the
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger door. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, both of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON”
or “OFF” appears.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Headlamps On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlamps Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO (A) position, the headlamps will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlamps will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
187
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ Phone (if equipped), power
sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle door
will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Off,”
“45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60 min.”
appears.
4
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn-by-Turn Navigation — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Display ECO — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display, this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Display Units of Measure In
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped)
can be changed between English and Metric units of
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD
player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD).
Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm)
touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ
user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
189
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The downward is displayed.
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
1. Turn on the radio.
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock current setting:
setting menu will appear on the screen.
1. Turn on the radio.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is disclock setting menu will appear on the screen.
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down- 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
ward is displayed.
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
played to change the current setting.
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
To Manually Set the Clock
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed the screen.
as follows to change the current setting:
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
1. Turn on the radio.
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.” Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Uconnect威 gps — RER Only
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
Changing the Time Zone
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
1. Turn on the radio.
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
daylight savings information is set.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
191
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are disthe word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
played to change the current setting.
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
4
192
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Show Time if Radio is Off
Changing the Time Zone
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
1. Turn on the radio.
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
193
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio
4
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
TIME Button
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
AM or FM frequencies.
and radio frequency.
TUNE Control
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
SCROLL control knob.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
195
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Memory
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
treble tones.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
4
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Buttons 1 - 6
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
197
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
CAUTION!
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
away and jam the player mechanism.
SEEK Button
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
can cause damage to the player.
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
RW/FF
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD file recording media and formats are limited. When
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricRW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) tions.
button works in a similar manner.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
AM/FM Button
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file norPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ranmally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
199
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
character extension)
VBR bit rate.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
•
•
•
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
201
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX
JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
4
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
RES/RSC Radio
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fearadio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
tures If Your Vehicle”.
time to turn off the radio.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Electronic Volume Control
Equipped
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “UnderON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
volume and to the left decreases it.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
203
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under- will begin to blink.
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With knob to save time change.
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
TIME Button
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
and radio frequency.
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
Clock Setting Procedure
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ procedure, starting at Step 2.
SCROLL control knob.
4
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
No program type or unNone
defined
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
Classical
Classicl
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
Program Type
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
205
16-Digit Character Display
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
4
206
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency AM/FM Button
station with the same selected Music Type name. The Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
mode.
Memory
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type When you are receiving a station that you wish to
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button is
Program Type
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
the following items:
16-Digit Character Display
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
207
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/ DISC/AUX Button
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Buttons 1 - 6
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
4
208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
(Continued)
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
209
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
RW/FF
file recording media and formats are limited. When
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricbegin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
tions.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
Supported Media (Disc Types)
works in a similar manner.
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
AM/FM Button
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
4
210
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
display.)
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
211
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
4
212
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
before writing to the disc.
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
213
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features If Your Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”.
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the EQUIPPED
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume REL/RET radios only with uconnect威. For sales code
RER, RBZ, REN, RB2 and REZ touch-screen radio UCI
down.
feature, refer to the separate RER, RBZ, REN, RB2 or REZ
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
User’s Manual. UCI is available only if equipped as an
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The option with these radios.
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
4
214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This feature allows you to plug an iPod威 into the Connecting The iPod姞
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector using Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port located on the center
the provided interface cable.
console. Once the iPod威 is connected and synchronized
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
to the vehicle’s UCI system (iPod威 may take a few
iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
seconds to connect), the iPod威 starts charging and is
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described
website for software updates.
below.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威 to this
• You may have to remove the connector pin protection
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connectuse the separate 16–pin connector port located in the
ing the cable.
center console.
• If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may
• Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the
not communicate with the UCI system until a miniradio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected
feature to control the connected device.
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
215
Using This Feature
Play Mode
By using the provided connection cable to connect an When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically
iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the
following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the
• The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
iPod威 and display data:
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
etc.) information on the radio display.
previous track.
• The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
playing a track, skips to the next track.
• The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector (if supported by the specific iPod威 device)
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
the beginning of the current track.
Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
4
216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
button long enough will take you to the beginning
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
of the current track.
to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have
seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
holding the FF >> button.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
mode to repeat the current playing track.
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which
seconds.
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
jump to the previous track in the list; if you press this
During Scan mode, you can also press the << SEEK
button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next
beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>
tracks.
button during play mode, it will jump to the next track
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
in the list.
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once you have
the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the TUNE control knob to select and
start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control
knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating
the information on the radio display.
217
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
4
218
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press
the TUNE control knob. This will display the next
sub-menu list item on the iPod威 then you can follow
the same steps to go to the desired track in that list.
Not all iPod威 sub-menu levels are available on this
system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod威.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the
iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving.
Failure to follow this warning could result in an
accident.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
219
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
4
220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
Reception Quality
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
faceplate.
following reasons:
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen. • The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode • Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
cause signal blockage.
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
221
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
position to operate the radio.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
SEEK Buttons
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next to normal display).
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
RW/FF
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
direction of the arrows.
without stopping until you release it.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
SCAN Button
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
4
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
and press and release that button. If a button is not
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butexited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
223
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by KICKER姞 HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) –
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display IF EQUIPPED
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
4
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio
amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from
any stereo audio source. A new feature of the KICKER威
audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound
for any audio source.
“Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers
for any audio source. This surround effect is available for
audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or
AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio
Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
front seat occupants. Please note that DSS effects are
dependent on the mix of the original recording. Some
audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
mode.
NOTE: Dependent on the audio source, the output may
sound better in stereo or DDS surround mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available to add more surround audio if desired.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
225
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
VOLUME Button
The VOLUME button controls the sound level
of the sound system. Press the top of the
VOLUME button to increase the sound level.
Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to
decrease the sound level.
AUDIO MODE Button
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
Remote Sound System Controls
displays radio and media mode information
depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
4
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
mode will change (i.e., from AM to FM, to Media mode, precautions:
etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
FUNCTION SELECT Button
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT
wiping from center to edge.
button to operate various radio, media, and
Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions 3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
(i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to or start disc; avoid scratching the disc.
playing songs in playlists, etc., depending on which radio
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI).
or anti-static sprays.
SCROLL Button
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters,
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
files, etc., depending on which radio is in the
too high.
vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have copyright encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
227
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain
a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These
comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior
conditions.
4
Manual Temperature Control
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Blower Control
Temperature Control
There are four blower speeds. Use this
Use this control to regulate the temcontrol to regulate the amount of air
perature of the air inside the passenger
forced through the system in any
compartment. Rotating the knob counmode you select. The blower speed
terclockwise, from top center into the
increases as you move the control
blue area indicates cooler temperaclockwise from the off position.
tures. Rotating the knob clockwise,
into the red area, indicates warmer
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the temperatures.
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C conposition.
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several selections of air distribution. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
229
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
small amount through the defrost and side window
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction, demist outlets.
and turned on or off to control airflow.
Mix Mode
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
seat passengers.
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
4
230
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side • If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
window demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with
system is in MIX, DEFROST, or FLOOR mode the
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times
windshield and side window defrosting.
and then turn off to indicate RECIRCULATION mode
is not allowed.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the • Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
these modes only when necessary.
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the RECIRCULARecirculation Control
TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside
Press this button to choose between outside air
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in
• In order to prevent fogging, when the RECIRCULARECIRCULATION mode. Only use the RECIRTION button is pressed and the mode control is set to
CULATION mode to temporarily block out any outside
PANEL, the A/C will engage automatically.
odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
231
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb- Max A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and RECIRCULAing the mode control selection.
TION mode buttons at the same time.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to Remote Start — If Equipped
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor. During remote start operation, the climate control softRotate the temperature control knob to the desired ware may override the climate control settings depending on the outside ambient temperature. The table below
temperature.
explains the different scenarios that could occur during
Air Conditioning Operation
remote start operation.
Push on this button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). A light will illu- Once the driver enters the vehicle, the control will return
minate when the A/C System is en- to the customer selected settings. This feature was degaged
signed to ensure maximum comfort during extreme
conditions. To enable the feature, customers must park
their vehicles with the blower control set in any of the
four blower speeds.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
4
232
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If Outside Ambient
Temperature Is
Less than 40°F
Between 40°F and 80°F
More than 80°F
Mode Overrides To
Temperature Overrides To
Mix
No Override
Bi-Level
Full Heat
No Override
Full Cool
Rear Window Defroster
Active
Yes
No
No
Summer Operation
NOTE:
• The feature can be disable by parking the vehicle with The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
the blower control set to the “O” (or OFF) position.
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
• For maximum performance, it is recommended that
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
the vehicle is parked with the blower control set to the
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
“High” (full clockwise) position.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Operating Tips
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Winter Operation
suggested control settings for various weather condi- Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
tions.
fogging.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
233
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
NOTE: Recirculation without A/C should not be used
for long periods as fogging may occur.
4
234
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 239
䡵 Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 240
▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Keyless Go™ – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
䡵 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 251
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 254
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
5
236
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 256
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 268
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 268
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ AutoStick威 — 3.5L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ AutoStick威 — 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped . . . 275
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual
Transmission Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
STARTING AND OPERATING
237
▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESP/TCS Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 287
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 300
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 301
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ 3.5L And 5.7L Engine
(With Automatic Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . 311
5
238
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ 5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) . . . . 311
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 319
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 312
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 318
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 332
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key
fob in the ignition switch. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
239
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle.
This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Normal Starting with Integrated Key – Manual
Transmission
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and turn the
ignition switch to the START position and release when
the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
5
240
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has
a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
before shifting into any driving gear.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Go™ – If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
241
Installing and Removing the ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing the Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
position.
Removing the Button
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the
button loose.
5
242
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button – Manual
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF Transmission Only
position.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
Normal Starting
accelerator pedal.
Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button –
Automatic Transmission Only
To start the engine, press and hold the clutch pedal while
pressing and holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
Release the button when the engine starts. If the vehicle
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
fails to start within 15 seconds, release the button, wait 10
accelerator pedal.
to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” proceTo start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or dure. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press- to the engine starting, release the button.
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
START/STOP Button – Automatic Transmission
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
Only
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
STARTING AND OPERATING
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
display a “VEHICLE NOT IN PARK” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
243
To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button – Manual Transmission Only
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in
NEUTRAL, then press and release the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. Place the shift lever in first gear or Reverse and then
apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
position.
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of
OFF position.
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and
the engine is not running.
5
244
STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
switch position will remain in the ACC position until
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to the OFF position.
to change the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
Keyless Go™ Functions – With Driver’s Foot OFF
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
the Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK or
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Go™ feature operates similar to an ignition
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and START.
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
245
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What to Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
5
246
STARTING AND OPERATING
Clearing a Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) – Automatic Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15 seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
Clearing a Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
START/STOP Button) – Manual Transmission Only occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce- repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the clutch pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
STARTING AND OPERATING
247
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
decrease as the engine warms up.
Six-Speed Manual Transmission
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
You or others could be injured if you leave the
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
vehicle unattended without having the parking
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
brake fully applied. The parking brake should alThe engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that especially on an incline.
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
5
248
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result
in damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchronizer damage.
Manual Shifter
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in- release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid pedal.
warms up. This is normal.
STARTING AND OPERATING
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
may result in transmission damage.
You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when starting
from a standing position.
249
Recommended Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
Axle Ratio
1-4
4-5
mph
20
25
3.73
(km/h)
(32)
(40)
mph
20
37
3.91
(km/h)
(32)
(59)
5-6
42
(67)
48
(77)
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively
steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
5
250
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete
stop, you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE
with the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN
position for Keyless Go™), as compared to the ignition
LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Go™). This
is normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibitor system.
1–4 Skip Shift
There are times when you must shift the transmission
directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first
gear to second gear. This is to help you get the best
possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs
when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F
(41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is
in first gear, and the accelerator is at 1/4 throttle or less.
The “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” will be displayed
during these times.
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with
the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may
also be heard when driving at low engine RPM. Also,
this may be more noticeable when the transmission is
warm. This is a normal condition and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission.
When the “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” is displayed, the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from
first gear to fourth gear. After you shift the transmission
to fourth gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to
another forward gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING
251
Downshifting
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downCAUTION!
shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
grade.
Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
WARNING!
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
a complete stop.
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
could have an accident.
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
CAUTION!
into any forward gear when the engine is above
• If you skip more than one gear while downshiftidle speed.
ing or downshift at too high an engine speed, you
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
is firmly on the brake pedal.
• Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle
is moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you
could damage the engine and/or clutch.
5
252
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
• Shift lever position
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation, and
the road characteristics.
NOTE:
• After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears au• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn
tomatically, dependent upon:
the ignition switch to the LOCK position (OFF position
with Keyless Go™) before restarting. Transmission
• Altitude
engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after
• Vehicle loading
restart if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK
position (OFF position with Keyless Go™) first.
• Driving style
STARTING AND OPERATING
• The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before
the shift lock will release.
253
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key fob
from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once
the key fob is removed from the ignition, the shift
lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore,
you should never leave unattended children inside a
vehicle.
Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.
Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift Over-Temperature Mode
lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds
normal operating temperature, the transmission will
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
5
254
STARTING AND OPERATING
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response other ignition position (ACC, ON/RUN) position, and
during normal operation in DRIVE position. After the the brake pedal must be pressed whether or not the
transmission cools down, it will return to normal engine is running.
operation.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
Key Ignition Park Interlock
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access
prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position. The the override (using a flat-bladed screwdriver), carefully
key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the remove the override cover which is located to the right of
ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the the shift lever.
shift lever is locked in PARK.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
(RUN position with Keyless Go™) without starting the
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift engine.
Interlock (BTSI) system that holds the shift lever in the
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position (OFF position with Keyless Go™) and the en- 3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
gine is not running. To move the shift lever out of the
PARK position, the ignition switch must be turned to any
STARTING AND OPERATING
255
4. Using the screwdriver, press and hold the override tab With Keyless Go™ – If Equipped
through the access port on the center console.
If the engine is running, press the START/STOP button to
turn it off. Release the brake pedal and press the START/
STOP button once or twice to go to the ACC or RUN
position. Do not start the engine. Then, follow the instructions shown above to activate the override.
5
Interlock Manual Override
5. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
7. Reinstall the override cover.
256
STARTING AND OPERATING
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
Shift Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING
257
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned
from the LOCK (OFF position with Keyless Go™) to
the ON position (RUN position with Keyless Go™).
The following indicators should be used to ensure that REVERSE
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position: This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for proseated.
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.
leave the vehicle.
5
258
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
transmission damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
trailers, use the ERS or AutoStick威 mode and select the
“3” range.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway achieve maximum efficiency.
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and the best fuel economy.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
259
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move the shift lever into the desired range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset the Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
transmission, use the following procedure:
as soon as possible.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
5
260
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
AutoStick姞 — 3.5L Engine
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
AutoStick威 allows you to move the shift lever to the left slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
(-) or right (+) when the shift lever is in the DRIVE grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
position, this allows the selection of the desired top gear. or personal injury.
For example, if you shift the transmission into third gear,
the transmission will never shift above third gear, but can NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
shift down to second or first gear automatically, when deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
shift lever to the left (-). The transmission will shift to the
needed.
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Operation
Switching from AutoStick威 to DRIVE can be done at any AutoStick姞 — 5.7L Engine
vehicle speed. To shift from DRIVE mode to AutoStick威 AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
mode, move the shift lever to the left (-) once. The current manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of
gear will be maintained as the top gear. To disable the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine
AutoStick威, simply press and hold the shift lever to the braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
right (+) until ⬙D⬙ is displayed in the instrument cluster and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
odometer.
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick威, simply
move the shift lever to the right or left (D+/D-) while in
the DRIVE position. The gear position will display in the
instrument cluster. In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission
will shift up and down when left or right (D-/D+) is
manually selected by the driver. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen. The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows to a stop (to prevent engine lugging) and
will display the current gear. Tapping the shift lever to
the D+ position (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift
(D+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. To
disengage AutoStick威 mode, hold the shift lever to the
261
right (D+) for a few seconds. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick威 mode at any time without taking your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
• You can start out in first or second gear. The system
will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop.
• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
5
262
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is engaged.
• The transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick威 is
engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more crisp/abrupt when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
STARTING AND OPERATING
263
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Limited Slip Differential
(LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of
wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
5
264
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
265
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
5
266
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
STARTING AND OPERATING
267
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated NOTE:
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all • When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
information.
before attempting to move the vehicle.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking • This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position. When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition
switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless
Go™), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
268
STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
Parking Brake Release
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
STARTING AND OPERATING
269
WARNING!
Parking Brake
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
(Continued)
5
270
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
271
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
short time after the stop),
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
axle.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • Brake pedal pulsations, and
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
related motor noises. These noises are the system perof the stop.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
5
272
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner, that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
273
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
accurate signals for the computer.
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as
The “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
possible.
Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The
light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
the ON position and may stay on for as long as four Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not
functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is
seconds.
required.
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
brake system is not functioning and that service is Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
required. However, the conventional brake system will brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This
continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), the
Light” is not on.
Traction Control System (TCS), the Brake Assist System
(BAS), and the Electronic Stability Program (ESP). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
5
274
STARTING AND OPERATING
An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill
Start Assist (HSA) is standard on manual transmission
models.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) – If Equipped
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS) – If Equipped
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
STARTING AND OPERATING
A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a
limited-slip differential (LSD) and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESP (Electronic Stability
Program)” in this section for more information.
Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.
This can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
275
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
5
276
STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual Transmission
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
Only
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backThe HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
WARNING!
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
during this short period of time, the system will release
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
responsible for braking the vehicle.
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
Disabling/Enabling HSA
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be
activate:
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
• Vehicle must be stopped.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un• Vehicle must be on a 7% grade or greater hill.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
277
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the 8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
following steps:
additional half-turn to the right.
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
90 seconds.
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will blink sev1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
eral times to confirm HSA is disabled.
straight forward).
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
to it’s previous setting.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) – If Equipped
This system enhances directional control and stability of
4. Start the engine.
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
5. Release the clutch pedal.
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
7. Press the “ESP OFF” switch (located in the lower
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
switch bank below the climate controls) four times within
maintain the desired path.
20 seconds. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” should turn
on and turn off two times.
5
278
STARTING AND OPERATING
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path conditions.
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
WARNING!
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those result• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atThe “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the tentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator others.
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
STARTING AND OPERATING
279
switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESP ON again, momentarily press the
ESP On
“ESP OFF” switch and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”
This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever
will turn off.
the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
The ESP system has two available operating modes:
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the
threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESP normally allows.
The “ESP OFF” switch is located in the switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the
“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESP OFF”
5
ESP OFF Switch
280
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESP
OFF” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn the ESP ON again by momentarily pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
Synchronizing ESP
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with BAS indicator. If the power
supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
discharged), the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” may illuminate with the engine running. If
this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to
the left and then to the right. The “ESP/BAS Malfunction
Indicator Light” should go out. However, if the light
remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/
BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” and the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. They should go out with the engine
running.
The system will turn the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” on continuously while the engine is running if
it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles
and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the
ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
STARTING AND OPERATING
281
NOTE:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
• The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS
Tire Markings
Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned OFF previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
5
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
282
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
CAUTION!
Do not use two different size tires on the rear wheels,
as this can result in rear axle damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING
283
Tire Sizing Chart
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Size Designation:
P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
284
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
285
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
286
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
287
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
5
288
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
STARTING AND OPERATING
289
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE:
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
calculated in Step 4.
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
manual to determine how this reduces the available
• For the following example, the combined weight of
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
290
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
291
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
292
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure
information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
293
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
294
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxiCompact Spare Tire – If Equipped
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein75 mph (120 km/h).
stalled at the first opportunity.
STARTING AND OPERATING
295
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
Emergencies” for further information.
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
5
296
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
STARTING AND OPERATING
297
Life Of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
factors including, but not limited to:
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu• Driving style
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva• Tire pressure
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
• Distance driven
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
WARNING!
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
You could lose control and have an accident resulting that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
in serious injury or death.
specifications or capability.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
5
298
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer. In addition, only install tire chains on
P215/65 R17, P225/60 R18, and P235/55 R18 size tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING
The 245/45 R20 size tires do not provide adequate
clearance for tire chains.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about 1⁄2
mile (0.8 km).
(Continued)
299
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on rear wheels only.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the lower
suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by
the manufacture.
5
300
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
smooth, quiet ride.
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintesafety and handling of your vehicle.
nance intervals. Remember, more frequent rotation is
STARTING AND OPERATING
301
permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recomrotation.
mended cold placard pressure.
The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped
with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
the following diagram.
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased presTire Rotation
sure.
5
302
STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
“TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM
Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
303
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale
Light.”
5
304
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
the tire.
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
Base System
active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
readings to the receiver module.
will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light”
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
and to maintain the proper pressure.
TPMS to receive this information.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors, and
• TPM Telltale Light
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. The “TPM Telltale Light” will
STARTING AND OPERATING
305
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn ON.
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
materials that may block radio wave signals.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
wheel housings.
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM
Vehicles with Compact Spare
Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
compact spare tire.
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
306
STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
• TPM Telltale Light
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
307
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or
more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right
Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values flashing.
5
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition
(those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation value.
Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the
system will automatically update, the graphic display in
the EVIC will stop flashing, and the “TPM Telltale Light”
308
STARTING AND OPERATING
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer
flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
309
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “TPM
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
the TPM sensors.
flashing pressure value.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
materials that may block radio wave signals.
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
wheel housings.
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
5
310
STARTING AND OPERATING
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.5L and 5.7L Engine (with Automatic
Transmission)
The 3.5L and 5.7L engine (with automatic
transmission) is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum
performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
311
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World
Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications, if they are available.
5.7L Engine (with Manual Transmission)
The 5.7L engine (with manual transmission) is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality premium unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating of 91 or higher.
5
312
STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoProblems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will proE85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
fuel system components.
methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
methanol.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxyE-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. OxygenNon-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containates are required in some areas of the country during the
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
313
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: exposure to E-85 fuel.
• operate in a lean mode
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• poor engine performance
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• poor cold start and cold drivability
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
E-85 perform the following:
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
• change the engine oil and oil filter
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
engine controller memory
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
5
314
STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
(Continued) NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
315
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
316
STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap – R/T Model
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Cap – Base Model
STARTING AND OPERATING
317
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic • Month and year of manufacture
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
information.
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
319
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
Overloading
GVWR.
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles front and rear GAWR.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
rear GAWR.
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
5
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
separately. It is important that you distribute the load to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs.
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and TRAILER TOWING
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
GVWR.
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as review this information to tow your load as efficiently
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before and safely as possible.
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within and recommendations in this manual concerning vethe specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. hicles used for trailer towing.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
STARTING AND OPERATING
321
Common Towing Definitions
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
you in understanding the following information:
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all rear GAWR.
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or temWARNING!
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
supported by the scale.
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
5
322
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less than 10%
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational
vehicle
dealer
for
additional
information.
323
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. your vehicle.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
5
324
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
3.5L Automatic
12 sq ft (1.11 sq m)
5.7L Automatic
12 sq ft (1.11 sq m)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt.
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING
325
Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driveweight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
train components the following guidelines are recom• The tongue weight of the trailer.
mended:
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
CAUTION!
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle.
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
5
326
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight.)
327
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
Towing Requirements – Tires
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
GVWR and GAWR limits.
spare tire.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and OperThis could cause inadequate braking and possible
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
personal injury.
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
5
328
STARTING AND OPERATING
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING
329
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
330
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use
the AutoStick威 mode to select a lower gear range.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
STARTING AND OPERATING
331
− Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Cooling System
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to To reduce potential for engine and transmission overmaximize fuel efficiency.
heating, take the following actions:
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
AutoStick威
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
− By using the AutoStick威 mode and selecting a specific
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
gear range, frequent shifting can be avoided. The
highest gear range should be selected that allows for − Highway Driving
adequate performance. For example, choose “4” if the Reduce speed.
desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if
− Air Conditioning
needed to maintain the desired speed.
Turn off temporarily.
5
332
STARTING AND OPERATING
The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the
wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installation. The parking brake must remain engaged unless the
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft
vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow
is removed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
vehicle, or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled. See
while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe
your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal
transmission damage.
and reinstallation procedures, including flange
orientation/alignment, use of thread-locking compound,
WARNING!
proper bolt torque specifications, etc.
If the driveshaft is removed, the vehicle can roll even
if the transmission is in PARK, which could cause
serious injury or death.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Jacking And Changing a Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
䡵 TIREFIT Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . 337
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Sealing a Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . 347
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
6
334
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Without The Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
335
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument though the ignition has been placed in the OFF position.
panel.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning may wear down your battery.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate acturn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
tion.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • On the highways — slow down.
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
other motorists.
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
6
336
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116 °C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C Small punctures up to 1⁄4” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control -4°F (-20°C).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
337
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you TIREFIT Kit Components and Operation
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (88 km/hr).
TIREFIT Storage
The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk.
6
1. Sealant Bottle
2. Pressure Gauge
3. Power Button
TIREFIT Location
4. Mode Select Knob
338
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Power Plug and Cable
6. Air Pump Hose (Black)
7. Sealant Hose (Clear with Yellow Cap)
8. Accessory Storage Compartment
Using the Mode Select Knob and Hoses
Selecting Air Mode
Turn the Mode Select knob (4) to this position
for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air
Pump Hose (6) when selecting this mode.
Using the Power Button
Push and release the button (3) once to turn
ON the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
button (3) again to turn OFF the TIREFIT kit.
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
• Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and sealant
hose (7) prior to the expiration date (printed on the
bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
• The sealant bottle (1) and sealant hose (7) is a one tire
Selecting Sealant Mode
application use. After each use, always immediately
Turn the Mode Select knob (4) to this position
replace these components at an authorized dealer.
to inject the TIREFIT Sealant and to inflate the
tire. Use the Sealant Hose (Clear hose with the • When the TIREFIT Sealant is in a liquid form, clean
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
Yellow Cap) (7) when selecting this mode.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (8) for inflating
sport balls, rafts, or like inflatable items. However, use
only the Black Air Pump Hose (6) and make sure the
Mode Select Knob (4) is in the Air Mode when
inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into
them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1⁄4” (6mm) diameter in the tread of
your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry TIREFIT kit by hoses.
339
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to traffic. Pull far enough off the road
to avoid the danger of being hit when using the
TIREFIT kit.
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
− If the cut or puncture in the tire tread is approximately 0.24 in. (6 mm) or larger.
− If the tire has any sidewall damage.
− If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
− If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
− If the wheel has any damage.
(Continued)
6
340
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
− If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep TIREFIT away from open flame or heat
source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin: It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
• Use the gloves provided in the Accessory Storage
Compartment (8) when operating the TIREFIT kit.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
341
Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT
(B) Setting Up to Use TIREFIT:
(A) Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT:
1. Remove the gloves from the Accessory Storage Compartment (8) and place them on your hands.
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn ON the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Turn the Mode Select knob (4) to the Sealant Mode
position.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. 3. Uncoil the Clear Sealant Hose (7) and then remove the
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the Yellow Cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground.
4. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
This will provide the best positioning of the kit when
deflated tire.
injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the
air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the 5. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
valve stem in this position before proceeding.
the fitting at the end of the Clear Sealant Hose (7) onto
the valve stem.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn OFF the ignition. 6. Uncoil the Power Plug and Cable (5) and then insert
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
4. Set the parking brake.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
6
342
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant into the deflated
tire:
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 –
10 seconds through the clear Sealant Hose (7):
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE- 1. Press the Power Button (3) to turn OFF the TIREFIT
kit. Disconnect the Clear Sealant Hose (7) from the valve
FIT kit.
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. ReconNOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the nect the Clear Sealant Hose (7) to the valve stem. Check
parking brake engaged and the shifter in NEUTRAL.
that mode select knob (4) is on sealant mode position and
• After pressing the Power Button (3), the sealant (white not air mode. Press the Power Button (3) to turn ON the
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the TIREFIT kit.
Sealant Hose (7) and into the tire.
2. Connect the Power Plug (5) to a different 12 Volt
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON
the tire.
the TIREFIT kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If mode select knob (4) is on air mode and pump
is operating, air will dispense from black air pump hose
(6) only, not the clear sealant hose (7).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
343
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the clear • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
Sealant Hose (7):
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
1. Continue to operate pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As
the sealant flows through hose (7), the pressure gauge (2)
can read as high as 70 psi (5 Bar). The pressure gauge (2)
will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi to the
actual tire pressure when the sealant bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the sealant bottle is empty. Continue to operate
pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the
tire pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at
the pressure gauge (2).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the power button (3) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the steering
wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Clear Sealant Hose (7)
from the valve stem, reinstall the Yellow Cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in
the vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D)
“Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire”.
6
344
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug and Cable
(5) may get hot after use, so should be handled
carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the Yellow Cap on the fitting at
the end of the Clear Sealant Hose (7) can result in
sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the
vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant
contacting internal TIREFIT kit components
which may cause permanent damage to the kit.
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h) until
having the tire repaired or replaced. Failure to follow
this warning can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(D) Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire:
Immediately after injecting sealant, and inflating tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h).
(E) After Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire:
Follow Step (A) “Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT”
before continuing.
1. Turn the Mode Select knob (4) to the Air Mode
position.
2. Uncoil the Black Air Pump Hose (6) and connect it to
the valve stem.
3. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (2).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
345
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar) , the tire is too 5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (7)
badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement.”
further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
1. Press the power button (3) to on and inflate the tire to
using the TIREFIT service kit.
the pressure indicated on the tire and loading informa(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement:
tion label on the driver-side door opening.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem and 1. Uncoil the Clear Sealant Hose (7).
then reinstall the cap on the valve stem.
2. Locate the rectangular Sealant Bottle release button in
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the the recessed area where you place your fingers to unlatch
the hoses (6) (7) from their storage area.
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the 3. Use the Yellow Cap on end of the Clear Sealant Hose
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser- (7) to depress the Sealant Bottle release button. The
Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and
vice center.
dispose of it accordingly.
6
346
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous- JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
ing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) to the housing so
that the Clear Sealant Hose (7) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing and the alignment keys on the
bottom of the bottle align with the alignment slots in the
housing. Then, press the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard, indicating the bottle is locked
in place.
6. Verify the Yellow Cap is installed on the fitting at the
end of the Clear Sealant Hose (7) and return the hose to
its storage area.
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
347
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
6
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
Opening The Access Panel
348
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
Jack Fastener
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
349
6. Block the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking and Changing a Tire
6
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
350
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
(Continued)
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. If equipped with steel wheels, do not remove the
wheel cover at this time. If equipped with aluminum
wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the
lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before
raising the vehicle.
351
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges
and retention teeth.
6
Center Cap Removal
352
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to 4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
while the wheel is still on the ground.
Jack Engagement Locations
Lug Nut Removal/Installation
1 — Tighten
2 — Loosen
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
353
avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
6. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped), and wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
tire. Remove the cover by hand. Do not pry it off.
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
7. Mount the spare tire.
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
NOTE: For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. service station.
However, when reinstalling the road tire, follow the
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
procedure under “Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installaof the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
tion” in place of the remaining steps in this procedure.
down the fastener.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To
6
354
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use
with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
• Keep tire inflated to 60 psi (414 KPa) cold inflation
pressure.
• This tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) speed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
355
Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation — If
Equipped
NOTE: Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. For vehicles equipped
with wheel covers, perform Steps 2 and 3. For vehicles
equipped with center caps, proceed to Step 4.
2. Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs, which are
on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the
valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.
6
Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
356
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the 7. For vehicles equipped with center caps, install the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, center cap by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a force to install the center cap.
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
8. Stow the jack, tools, and spare tire. Make sure the base
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug down the fastener.
nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
WARNING!
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is
lowered to the ground.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehandle counterclockwise.
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
357
WARNING!
When temperatures are below the freezing point,
electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do not
attempt jump-starting because the battery could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. Battery
temperature must be brought above freezing point
before attempting a jump-start.
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
6
358
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
1 — Remote Negative (-) Post
2 — Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Battery Posts
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using a another vehicle to jump-start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
359
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
6
360
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster you should have the battery and charging system inbattery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start spected at your authorized dealer.
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelerator pedal
pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, is most effective.
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Program,” or “Traction Control” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
361
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between “1st” and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
6
362
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved
method of towing without the ignition key is with a
flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Flat towing of vehicles is permitted within the following
limitations:
With The Key Fob
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions:
• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL
• The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km)
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h)
CAUTION!
Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe
transmission damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to
be towed more than 15 miles (24 km) or faster than
30 mph (48 km/h), the vehicle must be transported using
a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• If the transmission is not operative or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (24 km)
or faster than 30 mph (48 kph), then the only
approved method of towing is with a flatbed
truck. Otherwise, damage to the transmission may
result.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
(Continued)
363
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the RUN
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 370
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
7
366
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System – Manual
Transmission (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 394
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 395
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp — Models With
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . 410
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, And Park/Turn Lamp — Models
With High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ Integrated Power Module (IPM) . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 404
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 416
367
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
7
368
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.5L
1
2
3
4
5
— Integrated Power Module
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Engine Oil Fill
Engine Oil Dipstick
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
369
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Integrated Power Module
Coolant Pressure Cap
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Engine Oil Fill
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
370
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
371
Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replaceproblem continues, the message will appear the next time ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, the vehicle may fail the test.
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap This vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
may also turn on the MIL.
check if this vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
do the following:
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Insert the key fob into the ignition switch.
an inspection of this vehicle’s emissions control system. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
do not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON/
RUN position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as
part of a normal bulb check.
7
372
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to
happen:
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF Regardless of whether the vehicle’s OBD II system is
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that the ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should normal vehicle operation, you should have the vehicle
not proceed to the I/M station.
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
running.
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that the vehicle’s OBD II REPLACEMENT PARTS
system is ready, and you can proceed to the I/M Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
station.
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enIf the OBD II system is not ready, you should see an sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
authorized dealer or repair facility. If this vehicle was caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these service manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
373
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
7
374
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level – 3.5L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must Checking Oil Level – 5.7L Engine
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
375
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
fully warmed engine is shut off.
whichever occurs first.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
7
376
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.5L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for for all operating
temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Refer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifiLubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
should not be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
377
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
Materials Added to Engine Oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engi- quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
neered product and its performance may be impaired by service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
supplemental additives.
filter and are recommended.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
7
378
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
WARNING!
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
recommended.
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air Maintenance-Free Battery
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
near the engine compartment before starting the maintenance required.
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
serious personal injury.
engine compartment for jump-starting.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
379
WARNING!
Battery Location
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
(Continued)
7
380
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
381
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental removed. Particular attention should also be given to
7
382
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hood latching components to ensure proper function. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
When performing other underhood services, the hood the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
cleaned and lubricated.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威 marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
lock cylinder.
function.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the Adding Washer Fluid
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
tions of salt or road film.
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
residual water.
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
383
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some Exhaust System
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
system.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
rating information can be found on most washer fluid vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the comcontainers.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped).
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
WARNING!
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
7
384
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
385
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
against you.
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur,
safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the
engine OFF, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter,
obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s
specifications immediately.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle (automatic transmission only).
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
386
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position (OFF position for
Keyless Go™). The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition switch is in
the ON position (RUN position for Keyless Go™).
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh coolant. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RECoolant Checks
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
387
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
7
388
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
Adding Coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentraYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
(⫺37°C) are anticipated.
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionto five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
nance period, it is important that you use the same
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
engine cooling system.
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing accoolant (antifreeze).
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
389
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
7
390
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
391
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
freezing.
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
emissions.
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
system components should be inspected periodically.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
7
392
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately leak and a checkup may be needed.
if the brake system warning light indicates system failUse only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Reure.
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder when per- taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
forming underhood services.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
393
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
7
394
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain
the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacClutch Hydraulic System – Manual Transmission
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
(If Equipped)
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu- further information.
ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Change Transmission Fluid
Vehicle” for further information.
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immediManual Transmission – If Equipped
ately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Fluid Level Check
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
side of the transmission. The fluid level should be at the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
395
CAUTION! (Continued)
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
(Continued)
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
7
396
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection of Lubricant
CAUTION!
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor- Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis- the chemicals can damage your transmission composion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- Vehicle Limited Warranty.
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended Rear Axle
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transFluid Level Check
mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
Special Additives
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
product and its performance may be impaired by supple- Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
Change Axle Fluid
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
397
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
completely with clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumuresistance built into your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
What Causes Corrosion?
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
7
398
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
Cleaner Wax or equivalent, to remove road film, stains
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
and open.
scratch the paint.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
considered the responsibility of the owner.
finish.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
CAUTION!
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responDo not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
sibility of the owner.
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
Special Care
packaged and sealed.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
a month.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
399
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer Equipped
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
with a clean, dry towel.
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive, • For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
remove soap residue.
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
finish.
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
7
400
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condiupholstery and MOPAR威 Carpet Cleaner or equivalent tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or MOPAR威 Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean
or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomCleaning Headlights
mended for leather upholstery.
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folliquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, lowed by rinsing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
401
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel 1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
Glass Surfaces
with a clean damp rag.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or equivalent, or any com- 2. Dry with a soft tissue.
mercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abraSeat Belt Maintenance
sive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
right rear quarter window equipped with the radio
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean or
that may scratch the elements.
equivalent, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
directly on the mirror.
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
with the cupholder in the center console.
7
402
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine
compartment. This module contains fuses and relays.
Integrated Power Module
CAUTION!
• When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the integrated power
module and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
Cartridge
Fuse
—
2
—
3
—
4
—
5
6
—
—
7
—
8
—
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
—
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
30 Amp
Green
Washer Motor
9
10
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
Ignition Run/Start
11
12
EGR Solenoid/
Alternator
—
Ignition Coils/Injectors
Headlamp Washer Relay
– If Equipped
Starter
13
14
15
16
17
18
Cartridge
Fuse
—
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp
Red
—
50 Amp
Red
—
—
—
403
MiniFuse
Description
—
—
—
Windshield Wiper
—
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Valves
Radiator Fan Lo/High
—
—
—
—
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump Motor
—
Radiator Fan
—
—
—
—
—
—
7
404
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
19
20
21
22
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Access Panel
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
405
CAUTION!
Rear Power Distribution Center
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
7
406
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
2
3
4
CarMinitridge
Fuse
Fuse
60 Amp —
Yellow
40 Amp —
Green
—
—
40 Amp —
Green
Description
Cavity
6
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
—
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Cavity 1 of the Rear
Power Distribution
Center contains a black
IOD fuse needed for
vehicle processing during assembly. The service replacement part is
a 60 Amp yellow cartridge fuse.
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
—
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
5
7
—
8
—
9
—
10
11 *
12 *
—
—
—
MiniFuse
—
Description
Heated Seats – If
Equipped
20 Amp Fuel Pump
Yellow
15 Amp Sub Amp – If Equipped
Blue
15 Amp Diagnostic Link ConnecBlue
tor (DLC)/Wireless Control Module (WCM)/
Wireless Ignition Node
(WIN)
20 Amp Power Outlet
Yellow
—
—
—
—
—
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
13 *
14
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
15
16
17
—
—
—
18
—
19
—
20
21
22
—
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
—
—
10 Amp AC Heater Control/
Red
Cluster/Security Module – If Equipped
—
—
—
—
20 Amp Cluster
Yellow
20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet
Yellow
10 Amp Stop Lights
Red
—
—
—
—
—
—
Cavity
23
24
25
26
27
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
28
—
29
—
407
MiniFuse
Description
—
—
—
—
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
—
—
—
—
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Ignition Run, AC Heater
Control/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Cluster/Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/STOP
LIGHT Switch
5 Amp
Orange
7
408
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
30
Cartridge
Fuse
—
31
32
33
34
35
—
—
—
—
—
36
—
37
—
MiniFuse
Description
10 Amp Door Modules/Power
Red
Mirrors/Steering Control Module (SCM)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5 Amp Antenna Module – If
Orange Equipped/Power Mirrors
25 Amp Hands-Free Phone – If
Natural Equipped/Radio/
Amplifier Feed
15 Amp Transmission
Blue
Cavity
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Cartridge
Fuse
—
MiniFuse
Description
10 Amp Cargo Light/Vehicle InRed
formation Module – If
Equipped
—
10 Amp Heated Mirrors – If
Red
Equipped
—
5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview
Orange Mirror/Heated Seats – If
Equipped/Switch Bank
—
—
—
30 Amp —
Front Blower Motor
Pink
30 Amp —
Rear Window Defroster
Pink
20 Amp —
Amplifier/Sunroof – If
Blue
Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are
fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The
passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit
breaker in cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power
window switch, and the passenger power window
switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity
13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of
these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
409
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
VEHICLE STORAGE
Visor Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
battery.
Shift Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder . . LED (Serviced
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
at Authorized Dealer)
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the for replacement instructions.
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
7
410
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass BULB REPLACEMENT
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
and should not be used for replacement.
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Bulb Number See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Low Beam Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge
(HID) . . . . . . . . . . D1S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005 Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
Front Park/Turn Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145/H10 HID Headlamps
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057K
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057K
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
Rear Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . . . . . . LED an authorized dealer for service.
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
411
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick or
similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard side
to disengage the clip.
NOTE:
• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
2. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the front/rear side marker.
7
412
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2. Using a screwdriver, remove the tail lamp retainer.
4. Pull back the trunk liner.
5. Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the
tail lamp assembly.
3. Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail lamp 6. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs.
assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
413
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
12. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
13. Reinstall tail lamp retainer.
7. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector.
9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
14. Close the trunk.
install the replacement bulb.
7
414
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center Tail/Backup Lamp
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
415
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
3.5 Liter Engine
5.7 Liter Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified)
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.5 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
19 Gallons
70 Liters
72 Liters
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
5.7 Liters
6.6 Liters
11.1 Quarts
10.5 Liters
14.7 Quarts
13.9 Liters
7
416
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil – 3.5L Engine
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 3.5L Engine
ZFR5LP–13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection (3.5L and 5.7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Octane Recommended
– Automatic Transmission)
Fuel Selection (5.7L Engine –
91 Octane
Manual Transmission)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
417
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle – 3.5L Engine
Rear Axle – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W140 (API GL-5) or equivalent.
MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5) or equivalent
(with MOPAR威 Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear Additive).
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 422 E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance
. . . . . . 420
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
420
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type,
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the Emission Control
System. These, and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
C
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serNOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emisvice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
(805 km).
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
421 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
At Each Stop for Fuel
N
C
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance E
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your VeS
hicle” for further information.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichrequired.
ever comes first.
Once a Month
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
as required.
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
422
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
S • Change the engine oil filter.
C
H • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
423 M
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
E
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
425 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
427 M
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
429 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
N
T 90 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary. †
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.5L Engine).
❏ Replace the timing belt (3.5L Engine).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
431 M
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
N
T 114 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the following: Most of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt (3.5L/5.7L Engines).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
433 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
N
T 126 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
435 M
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid (if equipped) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C), driving in dusty conditions, or stop and go driving.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
N
T
150 Months Maintenance Service
E
Schedule
N
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
A
❏ Rotate tires.
N
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
C
E
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 442
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
䡵 If You Need Assistance
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 440
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
9
438
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
439
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized selling dealer. They know your vehicle the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealservice advisor know.
ers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
440
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized • Vehicle delivery date and mileage
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be reChrysler LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 992-1997
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621
concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Cus- Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
tomer Center.
Phone: (800) 465–2001
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Center should include the following information:
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner’s name and address
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico City: 5081-4568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
441
Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after the manufacturService Contract
er’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
You may have purchased a service contract for your to the contract documents, and contact the person listed
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex- in those documents.
pected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
9
442
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
443
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
3V9.
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
444
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, mainacquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vetaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
capabilities and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Call toll free at:
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi- • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
Or
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by• www.techauthority.com
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
445
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
446
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
448
INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267,270
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,274
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 388
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 378
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380,381
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227,380
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,54
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,53,58,71,164
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,54
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 48,51,54
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 387,388,415
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,274
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,273
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,31
INDEX
449
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,71
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,391
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,274
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392,417
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,270
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,391
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 69
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,395
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395,417
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . 259
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
10
450
INDEX
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,410 Check Engine Light
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,409 (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,61,62,65,67
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,190,194,203
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,315 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
INDEX
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 213
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 389
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386,390
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
451
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 387,415,416
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,401
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,229
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
10
452
INDEX
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 178
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . 404
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 133
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 162
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 174
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 371,420
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,369
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,369
INDEX
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386,416
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,315
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,415,416
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,375
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,415
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 55
453
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,315,384
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,383
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377,416
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,126,163
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Flat Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10
454
INDEX
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 416
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,166
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,416
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,370
INDEX
455
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 127
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,131
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,25,109,310
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,321
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,321
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
10
456
INDEX
. . . 247 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
. . 127 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
. . . 276 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 130
. . . 323 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . 150
. . . 137 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
. . . 122 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,61 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159,161 Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,181,241
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INDEX
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,46,47
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 64,65
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,409
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,123
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,53,58,71,164
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,273
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,270
457
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,410
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,137
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,127
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 280
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 162
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,166
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,410
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,131
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127,165
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10
458
INDEX
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,161
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,137
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 172
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,137
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . 129
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,137
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,410
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 172
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 170,301
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,126,163
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 161
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,320
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
INDEX
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 172,371
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247,394,396
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394,396
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,137
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
459
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,442
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,51,55
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,51,54
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,416
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,166
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,166
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,177
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,177
10
460
INDEX
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,416
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,375
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377,416
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,415
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376,415
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,371
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,335
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,443
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 287
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
INDEX
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 147
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,266
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
294
389
227
225
461
Radio, Satellite (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 225
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
10
462
INDEX
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,37,71
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,61,62,67
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,38
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Satellite Radio (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
INDEX
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 387,416
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,190,194,203
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,256
463
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 233
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,126,163
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294,347
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,239
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10
464
INDEX
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,266
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,409
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 45
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 162,336
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 287
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,291,445
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
INDEX
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,349
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,291
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
465
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 332
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
10
466
INDEX
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,256,395
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 137
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,166
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,35
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,163
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 213
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
INDEX
467
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,146
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,131
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,131,382
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,318,320
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,409
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
10
Chrysler Group LLC
10D491-126-AB
2nd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.